JP2015104539A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving player's convenience.SOLUTION: When condition determination means determines satisfaction of predetermined conditions, notification means performs notification on the basis of setting information set by a player. As a result, a player setting the setting information to setting means can recognize the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, and hence can suppress continuation of a game caused without noticing satisfaction of predetermined conditions since the player excessively concentrates on the game, thus improving convenience of the player.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a timekeeping means such as an RTC, and by varying the production based on the time information obtained from the timekeeping means, a different gaming property is realized depending on the time zone in which the game is performed, There are things that are aimed at improving the interest of players in games.

JP 2006-198033 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, when the player concentrates on the game, the game is over the important schedule or promise time, and the important schedule or promise time is concerned and the game is concerned. There was a problem of being unable to concentrate.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the convenience of the player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and power supply to the gaming machine are cut off. Time setting means capable of timing even in a state, and setting means capable of setting setting information by the player, time keeping information timed by the time keeping means, and setting information set in the setting means Based on the setting information when the condition determining means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Notification mode selection means for selecting a notification mode to be performed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means causes the display means to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit. is there.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising an erasing unit capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the setting information is set by the setting means. Then, based on the time information measured by the time measuring means and the setting information set in the setting means, the condition determining means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is established by the condition determining means, the notification mode notified by the notification means based on the setting information is selected by the notification mode selecting means. Thereby, the player who has set the setting information in the setting means can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the notification by the notification means, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied too much to concentrate on the game. Continuing the game without noticing can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the effect mode selected by the notification mode selection unit is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit. As a result, when a predetermined condition is established, an effect mode based on the notification mode is displayed on the display means, which is a place where the player pays attention in the game, so that the player does not notice the notification. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress continuing the game.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the setting information set by the setting unit is deleted by the deleting unit. As a result, when other players have set with the setting means, but quit the game before the predetermined condition based on the setting information is satisfied, the setting information can be deleted by the deleting means. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who plays the game with the gaming machine from being notified by the notification means when the predetermined condition based on the setting information set by the previous player is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothersome because the notification by the notification means interferes with the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the effect switching table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a time measuring device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the time measuring device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time acquisition process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the error command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the time measuring device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the timing device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time counter initialization process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time measuring device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the timing device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter initial value setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the period information table of ROM in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time measuring device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the table acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 enters the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  “Big jackpot A” is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and “Big jackpot B” is after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds When the special symbol shifts to the low probability state and the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a shortage of time when the normal symbol is in a short time state.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability of the special symbol is changing (the probability of the special symbol is being changed). In other words, the game state is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the “low probability state of a special symbol” refers to a time when the probability change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. In addition, the “short-time state (short-time)” of the normal symbol in the “low probability state of the special symbol” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It should be noted that instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or the amount of time per hit It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. In the case of “big hit A”, which shifts to a high probability state (probable variation state) of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, a variable display with the main symbol (corresponding to “high probability symbol”) with an odd number added is performed and the jackpot In the case of “big hit B” that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbol”) are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. The variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 7B) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 7C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is set for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Here, whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot is defined by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). The first per random number table 202a includes a first per random number table 202a (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability and a first per random number table 202a (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability. ), And the type of the first random number table 202a is properly used depending on whether the special symbol has a low probability or the special symbol has a high probability.

  In the first per random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability, "7, 307, 582" is stored as three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, in the first per random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol, as the 30 random numbers that become the big hit of the special symbol, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 "are stored. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability and the random hit that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. A jackpot type is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2 by a first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Specifically, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d includes, for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection normal reach”, “discovery super reach”, "Special reach" is defined, variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B shared, "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach" is defined, variation pattern for jackpot A, Various types of “special reach” are defined, and “various common reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the second random number counter C4 When the value matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. The second random number table 202c includes a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a low probability of the normal symbol. It is divided into two types, the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 7 (c)) for a high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state) with a high probability of being a normal symbol, and is included in each. The number of random numbers to win is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7C, the second per random number table 202c for low probability of a normal symbol stores 24 random number values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. " As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 24 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, the second per random number table 202c for high probability of a normal symbol stores 200 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e and a probability variation flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 has a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, the predicted various information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the various information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as a winning information. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 of FIG. 21: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The hour and middle counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and every time it is determined that the jackpot B is 100, the hour and middle counter 203e is set to 100. The In other words, when “big hit B” is reached, 100 is newly set in the hour / minute counter 203e regardless of the value of the hour / hour counter 203e.

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table for the normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203e is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for the low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. The probability variation flag 203f is turned on when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and is determined to be “big hit A”, and is turned off when determined to be “big hit B” (S213 in FIG. 17). , S214).

  When the special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, it is referred whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is on. If it is on, the special symbol jackpot lottery is based on the first hit type selection table 202b for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203f is off, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the first hit type selection table 202b for low probability.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, timing device 262, and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a (not shown) and an effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 8).

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of a rough variation pattern mode such as “outgoing normal reach”, “shared normal reach”, “shared special reach”, or the like. The variation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed mode of the variation pattern based on the mode of the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. The variation pattern table 222a is a rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time is measured (measured) by the time measuring device 262. Then, based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, the mode of variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background image are changed to a special performance mode every time a certain period of time elapses. The control is performed. For this reason, the variation pattern table 222a defines a variation pattern of a special production mode and a variation pattern of a normal production mode. Then, when it is determined that the effect is executed in the special effect mode based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, one of the change patterns of the special effect mode in the change pattern table 222a is selected. The variation pattern mode is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is not executed in a special effect mode (that is, the effect is executed in the normal effect mode) based on the time information (time information) of the timing device 262, the variation pattern table One variation pattern mode is selected from among the variation patterns of the normal performance mode 222a.

  That is, the variation pattern table 222a defines a plurality of detailed modes for each rough mode of the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the plurality of detailed modes include A variation pattern aspect of a normal effect aspect and a variation pattern aspect of a special effect aspect are defined.

  Next, the effect switching table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined based on the time information (time information) of the timing device 262 whether the production mode is a normal production mode or a special production mode. Then, the effect switching table 222b determines whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a normal effect mode or a special effect mode. Used for.

  The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. The production mode is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S1602 in FIG. 29) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timing device 262 (see S1603 in FIG. 29).

  FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect switching table 222 b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 8, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after the game machine is turned on. When the value of the elapsed time T indicates the normal performance period, a special performance flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned off. And based on these flags, the presentation performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, and the lamp | ramp display apparatus 227 is performed in a normal presentation aspect. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned on. And based on these flags, the presentation performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, and the lamp | ramp display apparatus 227 is performed in a special production | presentation aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the normal production period is within 60 minutes after the power is turned on, and the special production period is 10 minutes after the lapse of 60 minutes. And after 10 minutes made into the special production period pass, it is set as a normal production period again, and the normal production period continues for 50 minutes. Thereafter, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  In this way, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, if the game is played for one hour, it always switches to a different production period, so that the player can feel novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if a game is played for a long time, only similar effects are generated, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. In addition, since the 10-minute special performance period and the 50-minute normal performance period are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone serving as the special performance period and the time zone serving as the normal performance period. . Therefore, the game can be started for each player during the stage of the stage in which the stage of the stage that matches the player's taste is performed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 8, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the production period when the elapsed time T is 180 minutes or later is omitted, but in reality, the special production period of 10 minutes and 50 minutes are also used after 180 minutes. The normal production period is set to be repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b only needs to be set for at least the daily business hours of the hall. For example, the elapsed time T and the effect within the range where the elapsed time T is less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). A correspondence relationship with a period may be set, or a correspondence relationship for several days may be set. Also, the types of effect periods are not necessarily limited to the two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more effect periods with different effects may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a table defining the type of effect period is defined for each value of the elapsed time T. However, a table corresponding to all T values is not necessarily prepared. For example, the value range of the elapsed time T that is the normal production period and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the special production period are defined one by one, and the value of the value of the elapsed time T is defined. When the value is out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the range of the specified elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal performance period is 0 minute 00 seconds to 5 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the special performance period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes. It is defined as 00 seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that becomes the normal effect period and the value range of the elapsed time T that becomes the special effect period Control may be performed so that 60 minutes 00 seconds is added to each and the type of effect period in the range of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds is reset.

  More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the value range of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period is 0 minute 00 seconds to 5 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period is Only the information that it is 5 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is defined. Then, based on power-on, information defined in the effect switching table 222b is duplicated in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the duplicated information. When the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T defined in the replicated information, 60 minutes 00 seconds is added to the replicated information to create a new one. Update to information. That is, the range of the elapsed time T that is the normal performance period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the special performance period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. It is updated to information that there is. Thereafter, every 60 minutes and 00 seconds elapses, the reproduction information is controlled to be updated to new information by adding 60 minutes and 00 seconds, and the production period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. The type of is determined.

  In this case, since the data amount of the effect switching table 222b decreases, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a special effect flag 223e, and a time information storage area 223f are stored. Are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 30). The fluctuation start flag 223c is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 30). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The special effect flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. This special effect flag 223e is displayed from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the effect switching table 222b in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is turned on when it is determined that the switch is made (see S1610 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined that the special production period is switched to the normal production period based on the production switching table 222b (see S1606 in FIG. 29). The special effect flag 223e is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the special effect flag 223e is turned on, a special effect command is output (see S1611 in FIG. 29). Based on the reception of the special effect command, the display control device 114 or the like performs a round effect or a demonstration effect. Etc. are executed in a special production mode. The special effect mode continues until the display control device 114 or the like receives a normal effect command (see S1607 in FIG. 29) that is output based on the special effect flag 223e being turned off.

  Depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, it is indicated whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period, so the variation pattern selection process (S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). In the reference), when selecting the variation pattern mode from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110, is the special performance period confirmed by checking the timing information (time information) of the timing device 262? There is no need to determine whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are arranged side by side (by configuring an island) in the hall, an effect mode of an effect performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 configuring the island can be set in a time zone. Accordingly, it is possible to switch to different production modes all at once (linked to islands). By linking islands, display effects (background, 3rd pattern display, character performing a notice, etc.), sound effects (sound effects, back music, etc.), etc. are completely different depending on the timing of the game. Since it is executed, each player can start the game at the timing when the production of the production mode suitable for his / her preference is performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the production period is switched according to the elapsed time, but island linkage may be performed according to the day of the week, the date, the season, or the like.

  The time information storage area 223f is an area in which time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262 is stored when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The current time information (time information) acquired from the time measuring device 262 is stored in the time acquisition process (see S1211 in FIG. 26) of the start-up process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. The stored timing information is calculated by calculating the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is used to determine whether there is a special performance period (see S1604 in FIG. 29). Since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the type of the production period is determined based on the time information acquired from the timing device 262 and stored in the time information storage area 223f during the start-up process, a plurality of pachinko machines in the hall If the timing at which the startup process is performed in the machine 10 is matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. The timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Thereby, the person concerned of a hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. Therefore, a part of the pachinko machines 10 has a normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 have a special performance period, so that the player who is playing the game performs the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with what is being performed. In addition, as a method of turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at once, for example, an island composed of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source that can be turned on in units of islands is provided. It should be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the timing device 262, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process ( The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S1311), and the type of effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 has shifted from each other due to aging, etc., the time information shifted from each other is not directly used for determining the type of the production period. Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used to determine the type of effect period, the effect of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become special performance periods. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The time measuring device 262 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and has a real time clock (RTC) capable of measuring the current time. The electrical configuration of the timing device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the time measuring device 262. The timing device 262 includes an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. The timing device 262 is connected to a timing device power supply 263. The power supply 263 for the time measuring device is a power source dedicated to the time measuring device 262 different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the time measuring device 262 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. A button type battery is used for the power supply 263 for the timing device.

  An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the timing device 262. The input / output port 350 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as counting the current time and executing an alarm at the set time. Here, the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers as shown in FIG. This register table includes a time register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, the register 352 of the timing device 262 is provided with at least a timing register 352a and an input time storage area 352b.

  The time register 352a is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every second. The input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as timing information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. In the power-on time storage area 352b, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is written in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 when there is information on occurrence of power interruption. This is an area (see S1317 in FIG. 28).

  Here, the register table included in the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 can hold data of up to 8 bits in each of 15 addresses 0H to EH of the register table. Among these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the clock register 352a, and each address represents second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, and year, respectively.

  Details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking an address 0H representing seconds as an example. Bit 7 at address 0H is an L-fixed and non-rewritable bit, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bit0 to bit6. The symbol “◯” attached to bit 7 in FIG. 10 is a symbol indicating that the bit cannot be rewritten, and also has the same meaning in other addresses. In addition, bit 0 to bit 6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and the number of seconds of the current time depends on whether each bit is H or L. Shows if there is.

  For example, when the current time is 5 seconds, both bit 0 representing 1 second and bit 2 representing 4 seconds are H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all L. Accordingly, it can be expressed that 5 seconds, which is the sum of the seconds represented by the bits of H, is the number of seconds at the current time. When the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 representing 1 second, bit 3 representing 8 seconds, and bit 5 representing 20 seconds are H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. Become. As a result, 29 seconds, which is the sum of the seconds represented by the H bits, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time.

  Address 1H representing minutes, address 2H representing hours, address 4H representing days, address 5H representing months, and address 6H representing years corresponded to bits that are H as well as address 0H representing seconds. The current time is expressed by the sum of numerical values. The address 6H representing the year represents the last two digits of the year, and the first two digits of the year are fixed at 20. That is, the address 6H representing the year can represent only between 2000 and 2099.

  As for the address 3H representing the day of the week, bit0 to bit6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday, and any one bit is H, and the other bits are L. Thus, a specific day of the week can be expressed. For example, if the current day is Wednesday, bit3 is H, and bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, are L.

  Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the input time storage area 352b and can store data of up to 3 bytes. A register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing time (corresponding to address 9H) are assigned to the input time storage area 352b by 1 byte. ing. Also, the correspondence between each bit and the seconds, minutes, and hours is the same as that of the addresses 0H to 2H.

  That is, bit 0 to bit 6 of the register for storing seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and bit 0 to bit 6 of the register for storing minutes are 1 bit, 2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 10 min, 20 min, and 40 min, respectively, and bit 0 to bit 5 of the register for storing the time are 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, respectively. It corresponds to 10 hours and 20 hours. In FIG. 10, the symbol “●” is attached to all the bits. This is a symbol indicating that the information can be rewritten and read. Also have the same meaning.

  The correspondence relationship between each bit of the time register 352a and the input time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, the number of minutes, and the like is not limited to the form of this embodiment. For example, a power of 2 may be associated with the numerical value of each bit. In the present embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is configured with 3 bytes, but the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the hour and minute values, for example, as time information to be stored. Also, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Furthermore, instead of storing the timing information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage unit such as a RAM may be provided outside the timing device 262. In this case, the power supply to the storage means may be performed by the timer device power supply 263, or a power supply dedicated to the storage means may be provided separately.

  Addresses AH to CH are registers used for outputting an alarm signal at a set time, and addresses DH and EH are registers capable of outputting an interrupt signal for each set period. When the alarm function or the interrupt function is not used, addresses AH to EH can be used as the input time storage area 352b instead of the addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, since 3 bytes of addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, the number of registers can be reduced, so that the price of the timing device 262 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 10, only the registers assigned to addresses 0H to EH are shown, but in addition to these, registers assigned addresses other than 0H to EH are provided. A register or the like for changing the setting of the interrupt function or the like is provided.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. After that, it takes a long time to output data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. A first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 12B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a normal effect data table storage area 233b1, a special effect data table storage area 233b2, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing It includes at least a list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and a display special effect flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The normal data table storage area 233b1 and the special data table storage area 233b2 are the third over time with respect to one effect displayed based on the command from the main controller 110 in the normal effect period and the special effect period, respectively. Display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and transfer data of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table This is an area for storing information and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered from “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and the special effect data table storage area 233b2, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14 are applicable). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 14).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233 f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 45B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 35B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 35 (b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 45A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 35 (b)). )), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 15), and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production time of effects displayed based on the display data table in accordance with the storage of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 35B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3509 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3510 in FIG. 46). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The display special effect flag 233k is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. This display special effect flag 233k is determined that the time measurement data acquired from the time measuring device 262 in the process of S1604 of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311 of FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is the special effect period. In this case, the special effect flag 223e is set to ON and the special effect command is set to be output to the display control device 113 (S1610 to S1611). Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 sets the display special effect flag 233k to ON based on the reception of the special effect command, so that the current state is displayed in the special effect period in the display control device 113. It is the structure which can discriminate | determine.

  The special effect flag for display 233k is set to OFF when the normal effect command indicating that the state is the normal effect period is received (S2207 in FIG. 36), and the state is the normal effect period. Can be determined by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the display special effect flag 233k is configured to be set to OFF as an initial state.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 25. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A (S213).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON (S213). When it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot A (that is, jackpot B) (S212: No), the probability variation flag 203f is set to OFF and 100 is set to the hour / short counter 223e (S214). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), and the process is terminated. If the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S215, when the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the third symbol display In the device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, there are three random numbers “7, 307, 582” stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238" , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”. .

  Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203f is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the special symbol is a big hit (S302: Yes), the display mode for the big win is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit (big hit) of the three types of special symbols is compared. It is determined which of the jackpot types is A or jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (probable big hit), and if it is in the range of “49 to 99”, the big hit B It is determined that it is (time and college hit) (see FIG. 7B).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are defined, and “special reach” variations are provided for jackpot A. As a variation pattern for common hit / miss, “various common reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S302: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S304, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S308 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the process of S407, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not to win a lottery in special symbols (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big win, a big hit type), A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). It is determined by comparing (hit value) one by one. As described above, there are three random numbers “7, 307, 582” stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238" , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”. .

  Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203f is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (probable big hit), and if it is in the range of “49 to 99”, the big hit B It is determined that it is (time and bonus hit) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation flag 203f is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203f is OFF, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from the variation pattern selection table (FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202, the predicted lottery result, or the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit It is selected according to the type. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B are defined as" common normal reach "," shared super reach ", and" shared special reach ". Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a. Then, it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 17), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Note that the hour / middle counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / minute state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 7C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) or the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) or the process of S306 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S303 or the processing of S305 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 18). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update process. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) S215 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S1104 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1106, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1318 is performed in this start-up process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 28). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 28), it executes the power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 28). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). Then, time acquisition processing is executed (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Details of the time acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the time acquisition process is performed. Execute (S1211), set the interrupt permission (S1212), and proceed to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the time acquisition process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 during the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This time acquisition process (S1211) is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time from power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) performed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 described later. It is done.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the time acquisition process (S1211). When the time acquisition process (S1211) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1501). If it is not turned on (S1501: No), the timing device The current time information is acquired from the time register 352a of 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1501: Yes), the time information stored in the making time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is read (S1502), and the making time storage area 352b is read. It is determined whether time information is stored in (S1503). As a result, if it is determined that the time information is not stored (S1503: No), the current time information is obtained from the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 (S1503: Yes), the process of S1504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the process of S1505, the time information read in the process of S1502 or the process of S1504 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (S1505), and this process ends.

  As described above, the time information for determining the type of the production period is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by this process, and therefore the timing at which the start-up process is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall. If combined, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. The timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Thereby, the person concerned of a hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, a part of the pachinko machines 10 has a normal performance period, and the other pachinko machines 10 have a special performance period, so that the player who is playing the game performs the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with what is being performed.

  In this embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the timing device 262, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired therein, and the type of the production period is determined based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 has shifted from each other due to aging, etc., the time information shifted from each other is not directly used for determining the type of the production period. Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used to determine the type of effect period, the effect of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become special performance periods. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, in the off state), time information when the power is turned on is displayed. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223f when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main process (FIG. 28) described later. It is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262. Since the timing device 262 operates based on the power supply from the timing device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is It is retained even during a power interruption. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, the current time information is stored in the turned-on time storage area 352b instead of the current time information. The time information held during the power interruption state is read and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223.

  Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to put one pachinko machine 10 in a power-off state during business due to reasons such as a board replacement required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection being performed. However, when the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, it is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 when the power is interrupted can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Therefore, if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are turned on all at once with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. However, the time information when the power is turned on at the same time can be stored in the time information storage area 223f only by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again. The elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information before and after power-on. Therefore, since the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as other game machines, the power-off state is achieved. Only the pachinko machine 10 can suppress the timing at which the production mode is switched, and the player who is playing the game has a sense of incongruity that the production is performed in a production mode different from the other pachinko machine 10. Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the time acquisition process (see S1211 in FIG. 26), when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, it is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262. The time information is read (see S1502) and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (see S1505), but the present invention is not limited to this form. For example, a switch unit used exclusively for time acquisition processing different from the RAM erasure switch 122 is provided, and when the switch unit is turned on in the time acquisition processing (S1211), the time-of-use storage area of the timing device 262 You may comprise so that the time information memorize | stored in 352b may be read.

  As a result, the time information stored in the time-of-use storage area 352b of the timing device 262 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 203 prior to being disconnected. Can do. Therefore, even if it was in a power interruption state with a holding ball remaining, or even when it was in a power interruption state during a high probability state of a special symbol, it remained based on the power reactivation Since it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from disappearing or shifting from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player.

  Also, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erasing switch 122, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 is stored when the time measured by the time measuring device 262 is within a predetermined time zone. You may comprise so that it may read. In this case, as the predetermined time zone, for example, the business hours of the hall may be set as 10:00 to 22:45.

  As a result, the hall employee turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10 that has been cut off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake. It is possible to prevent the time when the charging is performed from being stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 233 and the elapsed time T from being shifted from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been disconnected. Therefore, the timing at which the production period is switched can be surely matched between the pachinko machine 10 that is in the disconnected state during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that is not in the disconnected state. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262, the hall employee performs a special operation when turning on the power. There is no need to do so, and the labor of the hall employees can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the time information read out in the process of S1502 or S1504 is stored in the time information storage area 223f. Instead, it is provided in the register 352. The register table (see FIG. 10) may be stored in unused bits. The bits not used here refer to, for example, bit 6 of the address BH and bits 4 to 7 of the address EH, and among the bits marked with “●” in FIG. 10, other than the input time storage area 352b. Indicates a bit. As described above, these bits are bits that can be rewritten and read, and even if the data is rewritten, these bits do not affect the operation of the timing device 262 at all. As a result, the register table provided in the register 352 can be used efficiently, so that the addresses assigned to the input time storage area 352b can be reduced.

  Specifically, for example, information representing seconds is stored in bit0 to bit6 of address 7H, information representing minutes is stored in bit7 of address 7H and bit0 to bit5 of address 8H, and bits6, bit7 of address 8H are stored. In addition, information representing time may be stored in bits 4 to 7 of the address EH. As a result, the address 9H not used for data storage can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the timing device 262 can be reduced.

  In the register table provided in the register 352 of the present embodiment, in FIG. 10, the bits marked with “◯” are the L-fixed non-rewritable bits. It is also possible to configure so that the bits marked with can be rewritten, and the time information read out in the processing of S1502 or S1504 is also stored in the bits marked with “◯”. As a result, the register table can be used more efficiently than when the time information is stored only in the bits marked with “●”, so that the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced, and the timing device Further price reduction of 262 can be achieved.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312, without performing S1302 to S1311. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312 and the variable display setting process of S1313 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, an elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S1311). In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), the current performance period is determined based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262. Details of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1313 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1316) and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Time information is written to the on time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), it is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262. Based on this, the current production period is determined.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, information on the current time is read from the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262 (S1601). The read current time and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 are read out. Based on the above, an elapsed time T from power-on is calculated (S1602). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262. For example, the current time information read from the clock register 352a is information indicating AM10: 15 (that is, all bits of address 0H are L, bits 0, 2, 4 of address 1H are H, bits 1, 3, 5-7 are L, bit 2 of address 2H is H, bits 0-3, 5-7 are L), and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f indicates AM9: 00 (that is, all of addresses 0H, 1H) Bit 0, 3 of address 2H is H, bits 1, 2, 4-7 are L), the elapsed time T is 75 minutes by taking the difference between 10:15 and 9:00. Calculated.

  Then, based on the calculated elapsed time T and the effect switching table in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 8), the current effect period is specified (S1603), and it is determined whether or not the current effect period is the special effect period. (S1604).

  As a result of the processing of S1604, when it is determined that it is not the special effect period (that is, the normal effect period) (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605: Yes), it means that the special effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in the current main process, so the special effect flag is turned off (S1606). Next, a normal effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect and the demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 as a normal effect mode is set (S1607), and the rear surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set. A back image change command for changing the image to a normal back image is set (S1608), and the process ends. In the processing of S1605, when the special effect flag is off (S1605: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S1604 that the special effect period is in effect (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609: Yes), this process ends. Further, when the special effect flag 223e is off, it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the special effect period in the current main process, so the special effect flag is turned on (S1610). Next, a special effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect and the demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 as a special effect mode is set (S1611), and the rear surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set. A back image change command for changing the image to a normal back image is set (S1612), and the process ends.

  Since whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off indicates whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period, the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). ), When the variation pattern mode is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (timing information) of the timing device 262 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is a special performance period. There is no need to determine whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special effect flag 223e is switched when the effect period is switched, but the special effect flag 223e may be updated every time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed. Alternatively, the normal effect command setting (S1607) or the special effect command setting (S1611) may be performed each time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern selection processing for selecting the variation pattern mode is performed (S1402), and the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1402) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). In the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1407. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1407, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). If a winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). When the processing of S1409 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1410)
Return to the main process.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1408 (S1408: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1413), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1419), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). This variation pattern selection processing (S1402) is executed in the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the third symbol is displayed. This is a process for selecting the type of variation pattern to be executed in the display device 81.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S2702).

  If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is ON, the variation pattern type for the special effect period is extracted from the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (S2703). ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S2702: No), the normal effect period among the change pattern types based on the change pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern type for use is extracted (S2704), and this process is terminated.

  Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, since the variation pattern type for different production periods is selected depending on whether or not the special production flag 223e is on, a variety of productions can be executed, and the player can have an interest in the game. Can be improved. Therefore, even if a game is played for a long time, only similar effects are generated, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. In addition, as described above, the 10-minute special performance period and the 50-minute normal performance period are periodically repeated, so that the player can easily grasp the time zone for the special performance period and the time zone for the normal performance period. can do. Therefore, the game can be started for each player during the stage of the stage in which the stage of the stage that matches the player's taste is performed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). ), The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, in the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. . In the processing of S1710, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). This variation display setting process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 47, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 33). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 34, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3302 in FIG. 45A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 35B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 has been received, that is, when a display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 15) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special effect command (S2204). If it is determined that there is a special effect command (S2204: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is set. It is turned on (S2205), and the process returns to S2201. If the special effect flag is turned on, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the special effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. In a demo display process (S3017), which will be described later, a demo display data table corresponding to a demo effect in a special effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect and the demonstration effect are executed in a special effect mode.

  By switching the production that had been executed in the normal production mode to a special production mode until then, it can make the player feel novelty, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, The interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  If it is determined in the process of S2304 that there is no special effect command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a normal effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If it is determined that there is a normal effect command (S2206: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is turned off (S2207), and the process returns to S2201. If the special effect flag is turned off, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the normal effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. In a demo display process (S3017), which will be described later, a demo display data table corresponding to a demo effect in a normal effect mode is selected. Accordingly, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect and the demonstration effect are executed in the normal effect mode.

  By switching the production that had been executed in the special production mode to the normal production mode until then, it is possible to make the player feel novelty, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, The interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, based on the special effect command output from the sound lamp control device 113, the effect aspect of the effect executed in the third symbol display device is a special effect mode and a normal effect mode. Although it is determined in which production mode it is executed, instead of this, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to read the time information of the time measuring device 262, and the special production period or the normal production based on the read time. The period may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S2206 that there is no normal effect command, it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2208: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2209), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S2209). This variation pattern command processing (S2209) executes processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2208 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a display variation type command (S2210: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2211), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the changing effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2210 (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2212). If there is a display round number command (S2212: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601). If the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601: Yes), the received command is supported. The round number display data table is selected from the special effect data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2602). On the other hand, if the display special effect flag 233k is off (S2601: No), the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is selected from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2602).

  Depending on whether the special effect flag is on or off, the round number display data table selected from either the normal effect data table 233b1 or the special effect data table 233b2 is set in the display data table 233d. Aspects can be switched. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty every time the effect mode is switched, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2604).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2602 or S2603, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S2605), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2606). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2607), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no display round number command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is an image change command (S2214: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .

  Also, in the task processing, when it is specified that either of the back A and B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216), and there is an error command. If (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. The processing corresponding to is performed without executing the processing corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 37) executed in this case, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301, Further, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents are cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001). If the new command flag is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing (S2104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified on the basis of the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display process is executed (S3017). ), Return to the V interrupt process.

  Here, the details of the demonstration display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the demo display process. This process is a process for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect.

  In the demonstration display effect, first, it is determined whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the special effect flag for display 233k is on (S3801: Yes), it indicates that the present time is the special effect period, so that the special effect is executed in order to execute the demonstration effect in a special effect mode. The demo display data table is acquired from the data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3802), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is not on (that is, is off) (S3801: No), it indicates that the current period is the normal effect period, so the demonstration effect is executed in the normal effect mode. Therefore, the demo display data table is acquired from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table storage area 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  In the process of S3804 performed after the process of S3802 or S3803, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3804). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3805). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3006), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3007), this processing ends, and the display setting processing (S2103) is entered. Return.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 12B and 12C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 35B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, a period in which an effect is executed in a normal effect mode (a normal effect period) and a period in which an effect is executed in a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode ( There are two types of periods, ie, a special performance period, and the voice lamp control device 114 determines which period is currently based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262. When a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, a variation pattern type corresponding to the determined production period is selected, and the third symbol display device 81 varies based on the selected variation pattern type. Pattern production is executed.

  Further, whenever it is determined by the sound lamp control device 114 that the effect period has been changed to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the change is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output from the sound lamp control device 114, and selects a display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demonstration effect based on the determined effect period. To do.

  As a result, the variation pattern effect, the round effect, and the demonstration effect, which are executed in the third symbol display device 81, are executed in a normal effect mode or in a special effect mode according to the elapsed time. To do. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time it switches to a different production mode, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the player in the game. .

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, when the production period is determined by the audio lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, and the type of the production period is switched according to the time zone. Instead, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the start-up process and the time information acquired during the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of the production period is determined based on the elapsed time T. Yes. Thereby, even if the time information of the timing device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aging, etc., in the hall in which the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the deviated timing information is used for the production period. Since it can be used for the determination of the type of the production period by converting it into a relative value of the elapsed time T, the influence of the shift can be reduced.

  Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become special performance periods. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired during the startup process based on power-on is stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262, and time keeping Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the timing device power supply 263 even in the power-off state, the time information stored in the on time storage area 352b is retained even in the power-off state. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasure switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the on time storage area storage area 352b, not the time information that the time measuring device 262 measures at the time of power on. The time information that has been stored is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and used to determine the elapsed time T.

  Thereby, one pachinko machine 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is cut off due to reasons such as the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even when the state needs to be changed, the time acquisition process is performed when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off the last time by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the time-of-use storage area 352b of the timing device 262 when the power is interrupted can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. .

  Therefore, if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are turned on all at once with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. However, it is possible to determine the elapsed time T based on the time information when the power is turned on all at once by simply turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again. Therefore, since the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as other game machines, the power-off state is achieved. Only the pachinko machine 10 can suppress the timing at which the production mode is switched, and the player who is playing the game has a sense of incongruity that the production is performed in a production mode different from the other pachinko machine 10. Can be suppressed.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262, and the type of effect period is set based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (time information) acquired from the time measuring device 262 based on power-on is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the time measuring device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (time information) 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is a normal effect period or a special effect period, and is specified. It is comprised so that the production | presentation according to the production period may be performed.

  When the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the power supply When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on, the time information stored in the turning-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. It is comprised so that it may store.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the time measuring device 262 is configured to count the elapsed time since the power is turned on, and the type of the current effect period is determined based on the elapsed time, and in the determined effect period. It is comprised so that the corresponding production | presentation may be performed.

  More specifically, an elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every second is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. The elapsed time T is specified. Based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of effect period can be specified.

  If the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the power is turned on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is held without being initialized.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that an elapsed time counter 352c is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 instead of the input time storage area 352b. It is a point. Further, the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The timing device 262 of this embodiment includes a register 352, as in the first embodiment, and the register 352 includes a register table including a plurality of registers illustrated in FIG. The register table includes a time register 352a and an elapsed time counter 352c. That is, the timing device 262 of this embodiment is provided with an elapsed time counter 352c instead of the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The elapsed time counter 352c is a counter used for specifying the elapsed time from power-on based on the count value. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is updated every second, and is initialized (reset) based on power-on to the pachinko machine 10. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c specifies the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (see S1331 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect switching table 222b. Is used to specify the type of the production period based on the

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter 352c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically illustrating a part of the register table included in the register 352. The registers (clock register 352a) assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H of the register table and the registers assigned to the addresses AH to EH are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H and the addresses AH to EH in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration and function as the register assigned to the. On the other hand, the addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the elapsed time counter 352c. In the first embodiment, among the input time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are respectively assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H. However, in this embodiment, the second is stored. A register for counting, a register for counting minutes, and a register for counting time are assigned to addresses 7H to 9H, respectively.

  The register that counts the second assigned to the address 7H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 0H) that represents the second of the clock register 352a described in the first embodiment. The number of seconds out of the elapsed time is expressed by whether each bit of bit0 to bit6 corresponding to seconds, 4, 8, 10, 20, and 40 seconds is H or L, respectively. The register that counts this second is updated by 1 every 1 second from the state of 0 seconds (all bits are L state), and when the register is updated in the state of 59 seconds, the state of 0 seconds ( All bits return to the L state).

  The register that counts the amount assigned to the address 8H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 1H) that represents the minute of the time register 352a, and is 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 The number of minutes in the elapsed time is expressed by whether each of bit 0 to bit 6 corresponding to minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes is H or L. The register that counts this minute is updated one by one every time the register that counts seconds is updated from the state of 59 seconds to the state of 0 seconds (all bits are in the L state). When the register is updated, it returns to the 0 minute state (all bits are in the L state).

  Further, the register for counting the time assigned to the address 9H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 2H) representing the time of the time register 352a, and is 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, The number of hours in the elapsed time is expressed by whether each of bits 0 to 5 corresponding to time, 10 hours, and 20 hours is H or L. The register that counts this time is updated one by one every time the register that counts minutes is updated from the 59 minute state to the 0 minute state (all bits are in the L state). When the register is updated, the configuration returns to the 0-hour state (all bits are in the L state).

  By referring to the count values of the registers for counting the seconds, minutes, and hours, the elapsed time from power-on can be specified. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 can be obtained by simply turning on the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off all at once. All the count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, since the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power interruption state, the count value can be continuously updated by the elapsed time counter 352c. When turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c when turning on the power is reset. The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, one pachinko machine 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is disconnected due to, for example, the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it becomes necessary to avoid the initialization, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be prevented from being initialized only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. As a result, the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

  In this embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 separately from the timing register 352a. However, every time the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch turned off, the timing register 352a is provided. It is also possible to reset all the timing information of bit 0 to bit 6 to L. As a result, the time register 352a can be used in the same manner as the elapsed time counter 352c. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the elapsed time counter 352c and the number of registers can be reduced, so that the price can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time T is calculated based on the time information (time information) acquired from the time measuring device 262 in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113, but instead of this, a fixed time is used. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the information (for example, 10:00) and the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262. In this case, the fixed time information may be defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 or may be stored in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262. As a result, when the time information (time information) timed by the time measuring device 262 is acquired when the power is turned on, or when the power interruption state occurs, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is stored in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262. Since it is not necessary to store in the input time storage area 352b, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  Among the startup processes, the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 execute the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. In the start-up process in the second embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is substituted for the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. ).

  That is, in the start-up process in the second embodiment, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the elapsed time counter initialization process is executed (S1221), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). ), Shift to main processing. This elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is a process for initializing the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and is a process for counting the elapsed time starting from power-on.

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1511). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1511: Yes), this process is terminated and the process returns to the start-up process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1511: No), the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is initialized (S1512). This process is terminated.

  Thus, in the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is OFF, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 can be obtained by simply turning on the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off all at once. All the count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, since the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  In the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c when the power is turned on continues. The count value is updated. Therefore, one pachinko machine 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is disconnected due to, for example, the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it becomes necessary to avoid the initialization, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be prevented from being initialized only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. As a result, the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processes of the sound lamp control device 113, the processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 are respectively S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. ˜S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and S1319, the same processing is executed. In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed.

  That is, in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, after the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), the elapsed time confirmation process 2 is executed (S1331), and the process proceeds to the command determination process (S1313). . This elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S 1331) is a process for specifying the elapsed time from power-on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352 c and determining the type of effect period.

  In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the process corresponding to the process of S1317 in the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. In the process of S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the power-on time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262. Is stored in the on time storage area 352b and is performed to retain the time information even in the power-off state. When the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the power-off state This process is necessary for specifying the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the elapsed time T is not determined based on the time information when the power is turned on, but the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. Therefore, the time information at the time of power-on need not be held during the power interruption state, and the processing corresponding to S1317 need not be performed.

  Next, the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is a process executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the type of the current production period based on the elapsed time T from the power-on. It is.

  Of the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331), in each process of S1603 to 1612, the same process as the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) and S1603 to 1612 in the first embodiment is executed. In the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) in the second embodiment, the processes in S1621 and S1622 are executed instead of the processes in S1601 and S1602 in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in the first embodiment. Is done.

  That is, when the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c of the timing device 262 is read (S1621), and the elapsed time T from power-on is calculated based on the read count value. After specifying (S1622), the process proceeds to S1603. As described above, for each process after S1603, the same process as that after S1603 of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in the first embodiment is executed.

  By this elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331), the type of the current effect period is determined, and the state of the special effect flag 223e is changed according to the determined type of the effect period. Therefore, depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period is indicated, so the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). 30 (see S1402), when selecting the variation pattern mode from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (time information) of the timing device 262 is confirmed and the special performance period There is no need to determine whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c in which the count value is updated every second is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. The elapsed time T from the power-on to the pachinko machine 10 is specified. Based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of effect period can be specified.

  If the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the power is turned on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is held without being initialized.

  As a result, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed. In the hall, all the count values of the elapsed time counter 352c of each pachinko machine 10 are initialized simply by turning on the power to all the gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off all at once. . Therefore, since the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power interruption state, the count value can be continuously updated by the elapsed time counter 352c. When turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c when turning on the power is reset. The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, one pachinko machine 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is disconnected due to, for example, the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it becomes necessary to avoid the initialization, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be prevented from being initialized only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. As a result, the type of effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

<Modification in Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262 is acquired. The type of effect period is determined from the elapsed time T determined based on the acquired count value and the effect period table 222b. However, in the time counting device 262, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b is set. Based on this, the type of the production period may be determined, and only the determination result may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this case, the determination result may be notified every time the type of the effect period is determined, or may be configured to be notified only when switching to a different effect period. In determining the type of the production period, the production period table 222b provided in the ROM 222 may be read to determine the type of the production period. This information may be defined, and the type of the production period may be determined with reference to this information. Thereby, since the elapsed time confirmation process 2 can be simplified, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided only in the register 352 of the timing device 262. However, the same counter means may be provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the counter value is cleared (reset) when the power is cut off, but when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, By referring to the value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262, the counter value may be set in the counter means of the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, it is not necessary to acquire a counter value from the elapsed time counter 352c of the time measuring device 262 every time elapsed time confirmation processing 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262, and the type of effect period is set based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (time information) acquired from the time measuring device 262 based on power-on is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the time measuring device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (time information) 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is a normal effect period or a special effect period, and is specified. It is comprised so that the production | presentation according to the production period may be performed.

  When the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the power supply When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on, the time information stored in the turning-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. It is comprised so that it may store.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a time counter 223g that is updated by subtracting the counter value by 1 every 1 msec, and the time counter 223g is provided. Based on the counter value, the type of effect period can be specified.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is in an off state when the power is turned on, the initial value 3599999 (a counter value corresponding to one hour) is set as the counter value of the time counter 223g. ing. Note that this counter value is stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 when the power is cut off, and is held even during the power cut off state. If the RAM erasure switch 122 is on when the power is turned on, the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is added to the counter value of the time counter 223g. And the initial value of the time counter 223g is set based on the period of power interruption.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a time counter 223g is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a time counter 262. In this register 352, a disconnection time storage area 352d and a counter value storage area 352e are provided instead of the input time storage area 352b. Further, the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 54, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, a RAM 223 is provided in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided with a time counter 223g instead of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The time counter 223g is used to specify the type of effect period according to the counter value. The time counter 223g subtracts 1 from the previous value every time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed by the counter update processing (S1341) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. After reaching 0, the loop counter returns to the initial value 3599999. Since the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed every 1 ms, the time counter 223g returns to the initial value every 3600 seconds (that is, 1 hour). The relationship between the counter value of the time counter 223g and the type of effect period is determined to be a normal effect period when the counter value is in the range of 0 to 2999999 (a counter value corresponding to 50 minutes), and the counter value is 300,000 to 300,000. In the range of 3599999 (a counter value corresponding to 10 minutes), it is determined that the special performance period. That is, every time the counter makes a round, a 50-minute normal performance period and a 10-minute special performance period come.

  In this way, if the game is played for one hour, it always switches to a different production period, so that the player can feel a novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if a game is played for a long time, only similar effects are generated, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. In addition, since the 50-minute normal performance period and the 10-minute special performance period are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone serving as the special performance period and the time zone serving as the normal performance period. . Therefore, the game can be started for each player during the stage of the stage in which the stage of the stage that matches the player's taste is performed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment includes a register 352, and the register 352 includes a register table including a plurality of registers illustrated in FIG. The register table includes a time register 352a, a disconnection time storage area 352d, and a counter value storage area 352e. That is, the timing device 262 of this embodiment is provided with a disconnection time storage area 352d and a counter value storage area 352e instead of the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The disconnection time storage area 352d is a register that stores time information (time information) that the time measuring device 262 measures at the time when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. The counter value storage area 352e is a register that stores the counter value of the time counter 223g at the time when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state.

  The disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a register table included in the register 352. The registers (clock register 352a) assigned to the addresses 00H to 06H of the register table and the registers assigned to the addresses 0DH to 11H are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H and the addresses AH to EH in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration and function as the register assigned to the. On the other hand, the addresses 07H to 09H correspond to the disconnection time storage area 352d, and the addresses 0AH to 0CH correspond to the counter value storage area 352e. In the first embodiment, in the input time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are respectively assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H. The area 352d has the same configuration as this.

  On the other hand, in the counter value storage area 352e, each bit is associated with a power of 2. Specifically, bits 0 to 7 of the register assigned to the address 0A are in order of 2 to the 0th power (ie, 1), 2 to the 1st power (ie, 2), and the 2nd power (ie, 4), 2 to the 3rd power (ie, 8), 2 to the 4th power (ie, 16), 2 to the 5th power (ie, 32), 2 to the 6th power (ie, 64), 2 to the 7th power (ie, 128), 2 to the seventh power (that is, 256) is associated with each other. Similarly, bits 0 to 7 of the register assigned to address 0B are associated with 2 8 (ie 512) to 2 15 (ie 32768), and are assigned to address 0C. 2 to the 16th power (that is, 65536) to the 2nd power of 23 (that is, 8388608) is associated with bit0 to bit7. By using these storage areas for 3 bytes, all values from 0 to 3599999, which can be taken by the time counter 223g, can be expressed.

  Both of the disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e are clocks provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Used to set the initial value of the counter 223g. The details will be described later when the counter initial value setting process (S1231) executed in the start-up process is described. However, the power interruption state is set based on the time information stored in the interruption time storage area 352d. And the number of times the counter value corresponds to the update of the counter value is specified based on the period of the power interruption state. Then, based on the specified counter value and the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e, the initial value of the time counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set.

  In this way, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an initial value is set in the time counter 223g taking into account the period of time when the power is interrupted. For example, one pachinko machine 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is placed in an uninterrupted state due to reasons such as a board replacement required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. The counter value corresponding to the counter value of the time counter 223g of the gaming machine that has not been cut off simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on even if it is necessary to do so. Can be set as an initial value. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the counter value of the time counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Thereby, since the type of effect period determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  It should be noted that all bits of addresses 0AH and 0BH of the counter value storage area 352e are H, and the case where the 0th to 5th bits of the address 0CH are H, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit are L is converted into the counter value of the time counter 223g. Then, it corresponds to 4194303, which exceeds the maximum value of the counter value 3599999. That is, all possible values of the time counter 223g can be expressed without using the upper 2 bits of the register assigned to the address 0CH. Therefore, other information may be stored in the upper 2 bits of this address 0CH. Accordingly, the register table of the register 352 can be used efficiently, so that an increase in the capacity of the register 352 can be suppressed and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  Among the startup processes, the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 execute the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. In the start-up process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the counter initial value setting process (S1231) is substituted for the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Execute.

  That is, in the start-up process in the third embodiment, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the counter initial value setting process is executed (S1231), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). , Transition to main processing. This counter initial value setting process (S1231) is a process of setting an initial value to the counter value of the time counter 223g, and starts updating the counter value starting from power-on, and the counter value is determined for the production period. It is a process executed in order to be able to use it.

  Here, the details of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) will be described with reference to FIG. In the counter initial value setting process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1521). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1521: No), the initial value 3599999 is set to the time counter 223g of the RAM 223 (S1522), and the special effect flag is turned off. (S1523), the process is terminated and the process returns to the start-up process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1521: Yes), the time is counted when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state from the time-off storage area 352d provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262. The time information measured by the device 262 is acquired (S1524). Next, the current time information is acquired from the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262, and based on the current time and the time information at the time of power interruption acquired in the processing of S1524, the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. The calculated period is calculated (S1525), and the counter value of the time counter 223g stored when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state is acquired from the counter value storage area 352e (S1526). Then, when it is assumed that the update of the counter value of the time counter 223g is continued without the interruption state from the period of the interruption state calculated in the process of S1525 and the counter value acquired in the process of S1526. A value corresponding to the current counter value of the time counter 223g is calculated (S1527), and the calculated counter value is set as an initial value of the time counter 223g (S1528). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set initial value of the time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the special performance period, that is, whether or not the set initial value is within a range of 3000000 to 3599999 (S1529). If it is determined that it is not the special effect period (that is, the normal effect period) (S1529: No), the special effect flag is turned off (S1523), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process. On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1529 that it is the special effect period (S1529: Yes), the special effect flag is turned on (S1530), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process.

  As described above, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time counter 223g includes the counter value of the time counter 223g when the power is cut off, Since an initial value is set in consideration of the period in which the state is in the state, for example, due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to replace the substrate, or an on-site inspection is performed, etc. Even when one of the pachinko machines 10 needs to be turned off, it can be turned off by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. A counter value corresponding to the counter value of the time counter 223g of the gaming machine that has not been set can be set as an initial value. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the counter value of the time counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Thereby, since the type of effect period determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processes of the sound lamp control device 113, the processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 are respectively S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. ˜S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and S1319, the same processing is executed. In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, a counter update process (S1331) is executed. Further, in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1316 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the processes of S1332 and S1333 are executed.

  That is, in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, after the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), the counter update process is executed (S1341), and the process proceeds to the command determination process (S1313). The counter update process (S1341) is a process for specifying the elapsed time from power-on based on the counter value of the time counter 223g and determining the type of effect period. Further, in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1315 that the information on the occurrence of the power cut is stored (S1314: Yes), the power cut flag and the power cut process Both the middle flags are turned on (S1316), information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262 is stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d (S1332), and the counter value of the time counter 223g is counted. The data is stored in the counter value storage area 352e of the device 262 (S1333). Thereafter, the power-off process is executed (S1318), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and the process loops infinitely. The processes of S1332 and S1333 are information used to set the initial value of the counter value of the time counter 223g when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. This is a process for storing in the register 352 of the timing device 262 in order to keep it even during the power interruption state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the counter update process (S1331) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the counter update process (S1331). The counter update process is a process for updating the value of the time counter 223g and determining the type of the current production period based on the updated counter value.

  In this counter update processing, it is confirmed whether or not the counter value of the time counter 223g is 0 (S3701). If the counter value is 0 (S3701: Yes), the initial value 3599999 is set in the time counter 223g. After setting (S3703), the process proceeds to S3704. On the other hand, if the counter value is a value other than 0 (S3701: No), the counter value of the time counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3704.

  In the process of S3704, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time counter 223g updated by the process of S3702 or S3703 is a value indicating a special performance period, that is, whether it is within a range of 300000 to 3599999. (S3704).

  If it is determined that the counter value of the time counter 223g is a value indicating the special effect period (S3704: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S3709), and the special effect flag 223e. Is determined to be on (S3709: Yes), this process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S3709: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3710), a special effect command is set (S3711), and the rear image is changed. A command is set (S3712), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the counter value of the time counter 223g is not a value indicating the special effect period (that is, a value indicating the normal effect period) (S3704: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. (S3705), and if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3705: No), this process is terminated and the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3705: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3706), the normal effect command is set (S3707), and the rear image change command is set ( In step S3708, the process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Since whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off indicates whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period, the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). ), When the variation pattern mode is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (timing information) of the timing device 262 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is a special performance period. There is no need to determine whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with the time counter 223g whose counter value is updated each time the main process is executed, and the counter value of the time counter 223g is provided. Based on the above, the type of the production period can be specified.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time device 262 and the counter value of the time counter 223g are sent to the register 352 of the time device 262. It is configured to memorize. If the RAM erase switch 122 is on when the power is turned on, the counter value of the time counter 223g is set based on the time information when the power is cut off and the counter value of the time counter 223g. When the update of the counter value of the time counter 223g is assumed to be continued without being interrupted, a value corresponding to the counter value of the current time counter 223g is set. On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 122 is in an off state when the power is turned on, an initial value (that is, 3599999) is set to the counter value of the time counter 223g.

  As a result, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the initial value 3599999 is set as the counter value of the time counter 223g. In the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed, all the counter values of the time counters 223g of the pachinko machines 10 are all initialized by simply turning on the power to all the gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off all at once. The value is set to 3599999. Therefore, since the type of the production period determined based on the count value of the time counter 223g can be matched with each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game produces a production mode different from other pachinko machines 10. Can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with being executed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, when the power-off state occurs, the time information when the power-off state is stored in the power-off time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e. The counter value of the time counter 223g at the time when the stored power interruption state is established can be held.

  When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the initial value 3599999 is not set in the counter value of the time counter 223g, but the power is cut off. Since the counter value taking into account the counter value of the time counter 223g and the period of time when the power was interrupted is set, for example, a board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10, an on-site inspection is performed, etc. For this reason, even when it is necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, the power supply is maintained with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The counter value corresponding to the counter value of the time counter 223g of the gaming machine that has not been turned off simply by turning on again is set as the initial value. Rukoto can.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the counter value of the time counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been disconnected. Thereby, since the type of effect period determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed.

  In the present embodiment, the time counter 223g is configured by initializing a counter value corresponding to one hour and subtracting it, but it is configured by adding up to the counter value of the corresponding time. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine. Also, a plurality of counters may be provided and configured with 8-bit counters, and each may be carried with an upper limit value. With this configuration, the number of bits of each counter can be reduced, and the counter can be easily configured. The counter may be constituted by a time counter IC or the like.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262, and the type of effect period is set based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (time information) acquired from the time measuring device 262 based on power-on is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the time measuring device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (time information) 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is a normal effect period or a special effect period, and is specified. It is comprised so that the production | presentation according to the production period may be performed.

  When the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the power supply When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on, the time information stored in the turning-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. It is comprised so that it may store.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the current production period is set based on the time information (time information) measured by the timing device 262 and the period information table in which the type of the production period is defined for each time. It is configured to determine.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a period information table 222c is provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in place of the effect switching table 222b. In the RAM 223, a period information storage area 223h is provided instead of the time information storage area 223f, and a closing time storage area 352b is not provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. Further, the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. Similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a ROM 222 and a RAM 223. The ROM 222 is provided with a period information table 222c instead of the effect switching table 222b provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided with a period information storage area 223h instead of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The period information table 222c defines the type of the production period for each time, and is used to identify the type of the current production period with reference to the time information (time information) measured by the timing device 262. . The period information storage area 223h is an area for storing the type of effect period for each time specified in the period information table 222c. In the table acquisition process (S1241) of the startup process (FIG. 64), the period of the ROM 222 is stored. Information specified in the information table 222c is read and stored.

  Here, the details of the period information table 222c provided in the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the period information table 222c. As shown in FIG. 62, in the period information table 222c, the type of effect period is defined in association with the time. When the time indicates the normal effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display special effect flag 233k provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are displayed. Is turned off. And based on these flags, the presentation performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, and the lamp | ramp display apparatus 227 is performed in a normal presentation aspect. On the other hand, when the time indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display special effect provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are displayed. The flag 233k is turned on. And based on these flags, the presentation performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, and the lamp | ramp display apparatus 227 is performed in a special production | presentation aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00 is a normal performance period, and 10 minutes thereafter, from 10:00 to 10:10 minutes. It is a special production period. And after 10 minutes made into the special production period pass, it is set as a normal production period again, and the normal production period continues for 50 minutes until 11:00. After that, a special effect period of 10 minutes and a normal effect period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  In this way, except for 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00, if there is a game for 1 hour, it always switches to a different production period, so that the player feels novelty by switching the production period. Can be made. Therefore, even if a game is played for a long time, only similar effects are generated, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. In addition, since the 10-minute special performance period and the 50-minute normal performance period are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone serving as the special performance period and the time zone serving as the normal performance period. . Therefore, the game can be started for each player during the stage of the stage in which the stage of the stage that matches the player's taste is performed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 62, the correspondence between the time after 12:00 and the type of effect period (period information table) is omitted, but in actuality, the special relationship of 10 minutes is also used after 12:00. The effect period and the 50 minute normal effect period are set to repeat alternately. The time in the period information table 222c may be set up to the minimum business end time of the hall. For example, the correspondence between 9:00 and 22:45 may be defined. The correspondence may be set in the range from 9:00 to 9:00 on the next day. Note that the types of effect period are not necessarily limited to the two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more effect periods with different effects may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment has a register 352 and a timing register 352a provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. It does not have 352b. That is, in the present embodiment, the register 352 is used only for the purpose of measuring time, and is not used for holding information during the power interruption state as in the first embodiment. In addition, about another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  Among the startup processes, the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 execute the same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. In the startup process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, a table acquisition process (S1241) is executed instead of the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. To do.

  That is, in the start-up process in the fourth embodiment, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the table acquisition process is executed (S1241), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), the main Transition to processing. This table acquisition process (S1241) is a process for acquiring the correspondence (period information table) between the time specified in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 and the type of effect period, and is specified in the period information table 222c. This is a process executed so that the correspondence can be used for determination of the production period.

  Here, the details of the table acquisition process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. In the table acquisition process (S1241), the correspondence (period information table) between the time specified in the period information table and the type of effect period (period information table) is read from the ROM 222 (S1531), and the read correspondence is transferred to the period information storage area 223h. Store (1532). Thereafter, the current time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 is read, and the type of the current effect period is specified based on the time information and the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h. (S1533).

  In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the specific result by the process of S1533 is a special effect period (S1534). If it is determined that the result is a special effect period (S1534: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on. (S1535) This process ends, and the process returns to the startup process. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1534, when it is determined that it is not the special production period (that is, the normal production period) (S1534: No), the special production flag 223e is turned off (S1536), and this process is terminated and started. Return to processing.

  Thus, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence defined in the period information table 222c is stored in the period information storage area 223h, so the correspondence between the time and the type of effect period ( The same information can be referred to every time regardless of whether or not the period information table is disconnected. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is disconnected due to the necessity of replacing the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it is necessary, if the power is turned on again, other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off are used to determine the type of the production period and the type of the production period. The same correspondence relationship as that (period information table) can be stored in the period information storage area 223h of the RAM 223. Accordingly, since the type of the production period determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing a game can play with other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the effect being executed in a different effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processes of the sound lamp control device 113, the processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 are respectively S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. ˜S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and S1319, the same processing is executed. In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, a time confirmation process (S1351) is executed.

  That is, in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the time confirmation process (S1351) is executed after the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), and the process proceeds to the command determination process (S1313). This time confirmation process (S1351) is based on the time information (time information) timed by the time measuring device 262 and the correspondence between the time and the effect type (period information table) stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223. This is a process for determining the type of the current production period based on the above.

  In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the process corresponding to the process of S1317 in the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. In the process of S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the power-on time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262. Is stored in the on time storage area 352b and is performed to retain the time information even in the power-off state. When the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the power-off state This process is necessary for specifying the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of effect period is determined using the time information itself measured by the time measuring device 262 without using the elapsed time T. There is no need to keep the information in the disconnected state, and there is no need to perform the processing corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time confirmation process (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The time confirmation process (S1351) is a process executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining the type of the production period based on the time information measured by the timing device.

  In this time confirmation process, the current time information timed by the time measuring device 262 is read (S3801), and the correspondence relationship between the read time information and the time and type of effect period stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 ( (Period information table) is compared (S3802).

  Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether or not the current time indicates a special effect period (S3803), and if it is determined that the counter value of the time counter 223g is a value indicating the special effect period (S3803). : Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808). If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808: Yes), this process is terminated and the sound lamp control is performed. Return to the main process of the device 113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S3808: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3809), a special effect command is set (S3810), and the rear image is changed. A command is set (S3811), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3803, when it is determined that the counter value of the time counter 223g is not a value indicating the special effect period (that is, a value indicating the normal effect period) (S3803: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. (S3804), and if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S3804: No), this processing is terminated and the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3804: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3805), the normal effect command is set (S3806), and the rear image change command is set ( In step S3807, the process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Since whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off indicates whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period, the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). ), When the variation pattern mode is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (timing information) of the timing device 262 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is a special performance period. There is no need to determine whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the type of the production period can be specified based on the correspondence between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h provided in the RAM 223 and the production period. It is composed.

  In addition, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory that is not backed up, the information stored in the period information storage area 223h is cleared when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, but the nonvolatile memory Since the correspondence relationship (period information table) between the time and the type of effect period is defined in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 configured with the period information defined in the period information table 222c when the power is turned on again By simply storing the table in the period information storage area 223h, it is possible to determine the type of effect period based on the same period information table as before the power interruption state.

  Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is disconnected due to the necessity of replacing the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it is necessary, if the power is turned on again, other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off are used to determine the type of the production period and the type of the production period. The same correspondence relationship as that (period information table) can be stored in the period information storage area 223h of the RAM 223. Accordingly, since the type of the production period determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing a game can play with other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the effect being executed in a different effect mode.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time information at the time of turning on the power and the time information at the time of shifting to the power interruption state are stored in the register 352 of the timing device 262, or a counter whose value is periodically updated is provided. Not. That is, since the time measuring device 262 is used only for acquiring the current time, the capacity of the register 352 can be smaller than that of the other embodiments. Therefore, the cost of the timing device 262 can be reduced by reducing the storage capacity.

  In the present embodiment, the period information table storage area 222c that defines the correspondence between the time and the type of effect period (period information table) is provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The correspondence relationship between the time and the type of the production period may be defined in the ROM 202, or the correspondence relationship between the time and the type of the production period may be stored in the register 352 of the timing device 262. In this case, in the table acquisition process (S1231) of the start-up process (FIG. 64), the correspondence relationship (period information table) between the time and the type of effect period is indicated by the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 or the register 352 of the timing device 262. And may be controlled so as to be stored in the engine information storage area 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, when the correspondence relationship between the time and the type of effect period is stored in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262, the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262, the time stored in the register 352, and the effect period The timing device 262 may be configured to determine the current production period based on the correspondence relationship (period information table) with the type of the current time. In this case, the clock device 262 is caused to perform the processing of S3801 to S3803 of the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed in the main processing (FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is currently It may be notified whether the type of the production period is the special production period. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, production is performed based on time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 and the correspondence (period information table) between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h and the type of the production period. The type of the period is determined, but instead of this, a counter unit is provided in the sound lamp control device 113, and the value is periodically updated based on power-on. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the value.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 when the power is cut off is transferred to the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is used instead of the time when the power is turned on. Is stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the player can set time information, and based on the fact that the set time has come, a predetermined notification mode is notified to the third symbol display device 81 and the like. It is configured.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration is set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. A set time storage area 223i for storing the set time information is added, and when it is determined that the time information is set in the set time storage area 223i, a process for notifying the notification mode is added. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that a set time storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and an operation input unit is added to the audio lamp control device 113. 23 is electrically connected. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The set time storage area 223i is an area in which time information set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 is stored. When the time information is stored in the set time storage area 223i, the notification mode is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the set time. The time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In the initial setting, preset initial data is set. When the initial data is set, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine that the time information is not set in the set time storage area 223i (FIG. 71). S4002: No).

  The operation input unit 23 is provided on the left side (not shown) of the frame button 22 so that the player can operate, and the input operation unit and its setting are set so that the player can set an arbitrary time. And a display unit for confirming the recorded time. The input operation unit is provided with respective operation units (press buttons) so as to set hours, minutes, and seconds. When the player operates the operation unit, any of the information (hour / minute / second) corresponding to the operated operation unit is added (for example, 1 hour for the hour, 1 minute, second for the minute) It is configured to be performed every second). In addition, when each is added to the upper limit value, the initial value is set to 0. The operation input unit 23 is provided with a determination operation unit, and when the player operates the determination operation unit, the time currently displayed on the display unit is set in the pachinko machine 10 as the set time. It is configured.

  Specifically, based on the operation of the determination operation unit, the time information displayed on the display unit is stored in the set time storage area 223i in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the set time has been reached, a display command for displaying the characters “set time!” On the third symbol display device 81 is set. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the operation input unit 23 is configured to set the time. However, the operation input unit 23 is not limited thereto, and is not limited to the mode (for example, characters, symbols, characters, background colors, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) May be provided, or the type of audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting color or lighting mode that is lit by the lamp display device 227, and the like can be set. It may be configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification mode is notified when the time set by the player is reached. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and the special pattern variation pattern table set in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not limited thereto. It may be configured to switch the type, or to switch by specifying the type (mode) of the variation pattern table. By configuring in this way, when the time set by the player is reached, the change pattern of the special symbol is switched, so that it is recognized that the set time has come without being noticed by other players while playing the game. be able to. In addition, the player can enjoy a predetermined variation pattern at an arbitrary time.

  Here, the change pattern table to be switched is set so that the change time and change type (out, reach out, etc.) are not different from those instructed by the main control device 110, and the type of character to be displayed, The background color, sound effect, notice effect, etc. are configured to be changed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the input of the operation input unit 23 is performed. An operation unit (press button) corresponding to initialization of time information may be provided in the operation unit. As a result, even if the player who has set the time information to be notified stops the game before the set time, the player who performs the next game can input the operation input unit 23. Time information can be initialized simply by operating the operation unit.

  A storage area (set time storage area 223i) for storing the set time information is not provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 but in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262 so that the pachinko machine 10 is disconnected. Even in the state, the set time information may be held without being initialized. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is placed in a power-off state against the will of the player who set the set time information due to reasons such as the need for board replacement due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it is lost, it is possible to suppress the initialization of the set time information, so that it is possible to reliably notify the player based on the set time information set by the player.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, in place of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311 in FIG. 29) of the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the notification time setting process (S1311) is different from the first embodiment. 70 (S1361) in FIG. 70 and a notification process (S1362 in FIG. 71) are respectively added. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the notification time setting process (S1361), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the notification time setting process (S1361).

  In the notification time setting process (S1361 in FIG. 70), first, it is determined whether or not the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 has been operated (S3901). If it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 has not been operated (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 has been operated (S3901: Yes), the time information input to the operation input unit 23 is stored in the set time storage area 223i (S3902), This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the notification process (S1362) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 69) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the notification process (S1362).

  In the notification process (S1362), first, time data obtained by the time measuring device 262 is obtained from the time register 352a, and the current time is read (S4001). It is determined whether time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002). If it is determined that the time information is not stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i, that is, the time setting is being executed by the player (S4002: Yes), the time read in S4001 and the set time are It is determined whether they match (S4003). If it is determined that it is the set time (S4003), a notification command is set (S4004), and then this process ends.

  When this notification command is output to the display control device 114, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 performs setting for displaying the characters “set time!” On the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the time set by the player can be set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the set time is reached, a notification mode indicating that the set time is reached is notified to the player. Thus, the player can recall a schedule such as calling or mailing at a set time, or can easily determine the passage of time since the game was started.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2251 and S2252 are added to the command determination process (S2102 of FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a command determination process (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2102).

  If it is determined in step S2206 of the command determination process (S2102 in FIG. 72) that the normal effect command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S2251). If it is determined that a notification command has been received (S2251: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S2252).

  Here, this notification command processing (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the notification command processing (S2252).

  In the notification command process (S2252 in FIG. 73), first, the variable display data table corresponding to the character display “Set time has come!” Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4101).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, time data representing the display time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. (S4104). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, the notification mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, thereby easily notifying the player that the set time has been reached. be able to.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the time set by the player is reached, a special variation pattern is selected, or a specific background (for example, a red background) is selected. Thus, it is possible to naturally recognize that the set time has been reached in the game performance. Therefore, it can be recognized that the set time is reached while the player concentrates on the game.

  In addition, since the variation pattern can be switched at any time, the game effect can be changed as the game time elapses, making it possible to make settings that match the player, and the player gets bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the notification mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, but the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 is always displayed. In addition, when the time set by the player is reached, a notification mode may be displayed in addition to the time information. Thereby, since the player can grasp the current time even before the set time, the player can recognize that the set time has been reached more reliably.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first to fourth embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 and the timing device 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the timing device 262, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs the performance period. However, instead of this, the main control device 110 and the timing device 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the timing device 262, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the performance period. It may be configured to discriminate the type. In this case, main controller 110 may include information on the type of effect period in the command output to audio lamp controller 113. Instead of the MPU of the audio lamp control device 113, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced by causing the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of effect period.

  In the first embodiment and the third embodiment, a storage area is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the information stored in the RAM 223 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power interruption state. However, instead of this, storage means that can hold the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power interruption state, It may be provided separately from the timing device 262. A specific example of the storage means is a flash memory or the like. Thereby, the storage area of the register 352 of the timing device 262 can be reduced, so that the price of the timing device 262 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is provided in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off when the power is turned on. It is determined whether the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is stored or the time information timed by the timing device 262 is stored (S1501 of the time acquisition process (S1211)). The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined based on signals output from hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine whether or not the power of each connected pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the hall computer, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with all the power of each pachinko machine 10 turned off. When it is determined that the power has been turned on (that is, when it is determined that all the pachinko machines 10 have been turned on simultaneously), a signal indicating that the power has been turned on simultaneously is output to each of the pachinko machines 10 that have been turned on. To be configured. On the other hand, among the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only the power source of one pachinko machine 10 is off and the power source of the other pachinko machine 10 is determined to be on. When it is determined that the power is supplied to one pachinko machine 10 that is turned off, a signal indicating that the power is supplied is output to the single pachinko machine 10 that is turned on. Configure. Then, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined according to the type of signal output from the hall computer when the power is turned on.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, whether or not the elapsed time counter 352c is to be initialized is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (elapsed time counter initialization processing ( Instead of S1511) in S1221), it may be determined whether to initialize the elapsed time counter 352c according to the type of signal output by the hall computer. In the third embodiment, the counter value to be set in the time counter 223g is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (counter initial value setting process (S1231) S1521). Alternatively, the counter value to be set in the time counter 223g may be determined according to the type of signal output from the hall computer.

  As a result, it is possible to turn on the power while maintaining the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power interruption state. Therefore, even if it was in a power interruption state with a holding ball remaining, or even when it was in a power interruption state during a high probability state of a special symbol, it remained based on the power reactivation Since it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from disappearing or shifting from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  In the following, in addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group> (Stores the power-on time when the power is turned on, and avoids storing the power-on time when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and timing means capable of timing even when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted In the machine, the acquisition means capable of acquiring the timing information timed by the timing means, the timing information storage means for storing the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, and the timing information storage means based on power-on Based on the time information stored by the time information storage control means and the time information storage control means that can be controlled to acquire and store the time information from the time means by the acquisition means. Based on the elapsed time discriminating means for discriminating the elapsed time and the elapsed time discriminated by the elapsed time discriminating means, an effect mode displayed by the display control means is specified. The predetermined condition is determined by an effect switching determination unit that determines whether or not to switch to an output mode, a condition determination unit that can determine whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the condition determination unit. When it is determined that it is established, the timing information newly acquired from the timing means by the acquisition means is avoided to be stored in the timing information storage means by the timing information storage control means. And a gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the timing information measured by the timing unit is acquired by the acquisition unit, and the timing information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the timing information storage unit. Then, in the time information storage means, the time information is controlled by the time information storage control means so as to acquire and store the time information from the time means by the acquisition means based on power-on, and the time information stored in the time information storage means is stored in the time information stored in the time information storage means. Based on this, the elapsed time after the power is turned on is determined by the elapsed time determination means. Further, based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means, the effect switching determining means determines whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific mode, Whether the above condition is satisfied is determined by the condition determining means. Here, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time information newly acquired from the time measuring means by the acquiring means is stored in the time information storing means. Is avoided by the avoiding means. As a result, if a plurality of gaming machines in the game hall are turned on all at once without satisfying the predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is satisfied even if one gaming machine is disconnected from the power supply. If the power is turned on again in such a state, overwriting of time information in the time information storage means is avoided by the avoiding means, so that the timing for switching to a specific effect mode is shifted due to the power interruption state, etc. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the gaming machine A1, the timekeeping means is capable of storing predetermined storage information, and includes a power interruption storage means capable of holding stored information even in the power interruption state, and the time information storage control means includes the power interruption state. In this case, the gaming machine A2 is controlled to store the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means in the power interruption storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the time measuring means, the predetermined storage information is stored by the power interruption storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power interruption state. Here, the timekeeping information storage means is controlled to store the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means in the power interruption storage means when the power interruption state occurs. Thereby, even if one gaming machine is brought into a power-off state, the time-keeping information stored in the time-keeping information storage unit is retained by being stored in the power-off storage unit. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the timing for switching to a specific performance mode should be matched with other gaming machines that have not been turned off simply by referring to the timing information that is kept even during the power-off state. Can do. Therefore, since the malfunction which the timing switched to a specific production | presentation mode shifts can be suppressed, there exists an effect that it can suppress giving discomfort to a player.

  The gaming machine A2 includes storage judgment means capable of judging whether or not time keeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means, and the time keeping information storage control means determines that the condition judgment is made when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the storage determining means determines that the timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the timekeeping information stored in the power interruption storage means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the storage determination means whether or not the timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means. Then, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage determining means determines that the timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the time measurement stored in the power interruption storage means Information is stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means. As a result, when the power is turned on in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied even though no time information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the time information is transferred from the power interruption storage means to the time information storage means. Is stored in the time information storage means, and whether or not to switch to the specific mode is determined based on the inappropriate time information. Can be suppressed. Therefore, since the malfunction which the timing switched to a specific production | presentation mode shifts can be suppressed, there exists an effect that it can suppress giving discomfort to a player.

  In the gaming machine A3, the timing information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is established based on power-on, and determines that the timing information is not stored in the power interruption storage means. When it is determined by the means, the gaming machine A4 controls to store the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means in the time information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the condition determining unit determines that a predetermined condition is established based on power-on, and when the storage determining unit determines that the timekeeping information is not stored in the power interruption storing unit, the acquiring unit newly acquires The time information storage control means controls the time information so that the time information is stored in the time information storage means. As a result, for example, when the power is turned on all at once for a plurality of gaming machines whose timing information is not stored in the power interruption storage means due to, for example, an initial shipment state, the power supply is in a state where a predetermined condition is mistakenly established. Can be stored, the timing information newly acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. Therefore, inappropriate timing information is stored in the timing information storage unit, and it can be suppressed that the switching determination unit determines whether or not to switch to a specific production mode based on the inappropriate timing information. Therefore, since the malfunction that the timing switched to a specific production mode shifts for every gaming machine can be suppressed, there is an effect that it can suppress giving a player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, does the effect switching determination means switch to a state in which an effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode? Whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determination unit When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notifying unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the switched effect mode. The game machine A5 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, there is an effect that the novelty can be felt every time the production mode is switched, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine A5, the display control means is in a state where an effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification unit, or the specific effect. A gaming machine A6, comprising: state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not an effect is being executed in a mode.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is only necessary to specify the presentation mode based on the information stored in the information storage unit, so that the display control unit does not need to acquire the timing information measured by the timing unit and determine the current presentation mode, and the display control. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A6, the gaming machine A6 includes control means for controlling the game, and the display control means includes:
Display specification means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means from among a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of display types, provided for each of the display types, for rendering an image to be displayed A regulation information storage unit that stores regulation information that defines drawing information indicating necessary information for each screen, and the regulation information corresponding to the display type specified by the display specification unit is selected from the regulation information storage unit. And a selecting means for selecting the prescribed information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means from the prescribed information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the display control means does not determine every image information necessary for drawing an image for each screen when performing the presentation, but the display control means stores the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the video without any frame failure can be reliably displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic B group> (stored in empty bit of Address other than RAM)
In a gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying an effect mode and a display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, it is possible to count time even when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted Each time the timekeeping means updates the timekeeping information, the timekeeping information updated with some bits of the first storage area composed of a plurality of bits in the predetermined storage area is stored, and the power interruption state However, the first storage means capable of holding the stored information, the second storage means capable of storing the information stored in the first storage means, and the first storage based on power-on in the second storage means Storage control means for controlling to acquire and store the time information stored in the area, and based on the time information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means, the elapsed time elapsed after power-on Elapsed time judgment And an effect switching determination means for determining whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination unit; And a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage control means is configured to store time information stored in the second storage means when the power interruption state occurs. The power interruption information is controlled to store at least a bit in which the timekeeping information in the first storage area is not stored, and when it is determined by the condition determination means that a predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine B1 that controls to store time information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, every time the clocking means capable of timing even in a power interruption state updates the timekeeping information, it is updated with some bits of the first storage area composed of a plurality of bits in the predetermined storage area. Timekeeping information is stored in the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is retained even in a power interruption state. And the information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage means is memorize | stored in a 2nd memory | storage means, The time-measurement information memorize | stored in the 1st memory area is acquired and memorize | stored in the 2nd memory | storage means based on power activation Controlled by storage control means. In addition, based on the timing information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode, Based on the input, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power interruption state occurs, the storage control means is configured to store the power interruption time information corresponding to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means in at least a bit in which the time information of the first storage area is not stored. So that the time information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Controlled by storage control means. As a result, if a plurality of gaming machines are turned on all at once without satisfying a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is turned off, it will be turned off. Based on the above, the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state stores the power-off information, and the power-off information is held even in the power-off state. Therefore, if the power is turned on again in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time keeping information based on the information at the time of power interruption that has been maintained even during the power interruption state can be stored in the second storage means. Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction which shifts | deviates by the timing switched to the production | presentation aspect being made into a power-off state can be suppressed. Further, when storing the power interruption information in the first storage means, the information can be stored not only in the storage area where no information is stored, but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and even when the size of the information at the time of power interruption increases, the information can be stored accurately. Accordingly, since more detailed power interruption information can be stored in the first storage means, the timing error when switching to a specific effect mode can be reduced. From the above, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage means includes a plurality of bits, and includes an interruption information storage area capable of storing interruption information in all bits, and the storage control means includes the interruption state. In such a case, the power interruption time information corresponding to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power interruption time information storage area and the bit in the first storage area where the time information is not stored. A gaming machine B2 that is controlled as described above.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first storage means, the power interruption information is composed of a plurality of bits, and is stored in the power interruption information storage area in which the power interruption information can be stored in all bits. Then, when the power interruption state occurs, the power interruption time information corresponding to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means is transferred to the power interruption time information storage area and the bit in which the time measurement information in the first storage area is not stored. It is controlled by the storage control means to store. As a result, the power interruption information can be stored in the power interruption information storage area and the bit not used for timing in the first storage area, so that the first memory is stored in comparison with the case where the power interruption information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, since the data amount of the power interruption information that can be stored in the first storage means can be increased, the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the power interruption information increases. Detailed power interruption information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, since the error in timing for switching to a specific effect mode can be made smaller, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes storage determination means capable of determining whether or not the power interruption information is stored in the first storage means, and the storage control means has a predetermined condition determined by the condition determination means. The power failure information stored in the first storage means when the storage determination means determines that the power interruption time information is stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine B3 that controls to store the time-measurement information based on the information in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the storage determination means whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first storage means. Then, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is established, and the storage determining means determines that the power interruption information is stored in the first storage means, the condition is stored in the first storage means. The storage control means is controlled so that the timing information based on the power interruption information is stored in the second storage means. As a result, when the power is turned on in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied even though the power interruption information is not stored in the first storage means, the second storage is performed based on inappropriate information. Since it is possible to prevent the timekeeping information from being stored in the means, inappropriate timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether to switch to a specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Judgment by means can be suppressed. Therefore, since the malfunction which the timing switched to a specific production | presentation mode shifts can be suppressed, there exists an effect that it can suppress giving discomfort to a player.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timekeeping information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is established based on power-on, and that the power interruption information is not stored in the first storage means. When determined by the storage determination means, the timing information updated with a part of bits of the first storage area is stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is established based on the power-on, and the storage determining means determines that the power failure information is not stored in the first storage means, the first storage area The timekeeping information updated with a part of the bits is stored in the second storage means by the timekeeping information storage control means. Thus, for example, when the power is turned on all at once for a plurality of gaming machines whose power-on information is not stored in the first storage means due to, for example, an initial shipment state, a predetermined condition is erroneously established Even if the power is turned on, the timing information updated in a part of the bits in the first storage area can be stored in the second storage means. Therefore, inappropriate timing information is stored in the second storage means, and it can be suppressed that the switching determination means determines whether or not to switch to a specific effect mode based on the inappropriate timing information. Therefore, since the malfunction that the timing switched to a specific production mode shifts for every gaming machine can be suppressed, there is an effect that it can suppress giving a player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state where the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode. Whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determination unit When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notifying unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the switched effect mode. The game machine B5 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, there is an effect that the novelty can be felt every time the production mode is switched, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine B5, the display control unit is in a state in which an effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification unit or the specific effect. A gaming machine B6, comprising: state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not an aspect is executed in a manner.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, it is only necessary to specify the presentation mode based on the information stored in the information storage unit, so that the display control unit does not need to acquire the timing information measured by the timing unit and determine the current presentation mode, and the display control. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, the game machine B6 includes a control unit that performs control related to a game, and the display control unit includes a display specifying unit that specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control unit from a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means provided for each of the plurality of display types, storing prescription information that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type for each screen; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the definition information corresponding to the display type specified by the specification information storage means, and the selection means stores the specification information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine B7, which is selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display control means does not determine every image information necessary for drawing an image for each screen when performing the presentation, but the display control means stores the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the video without any frame failure can be reliably displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (An RTC is provided with a counter to count the elapsed time since power-on)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and timing means capable of timing even when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted In the machine, based on the acquisition means capable of acquiring the timing information timed by the timing means and the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode An effect switching determination unit that determines whether or not, a condition determination unit that can determine whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the condition determination unit satisfy the predetermined condition. An gaming machine C1 comprising: initialization means for initializing timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means when it is determined that the game machine C1 is present.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the timing information acquired by the acquisition unit, the effect switching determination unit determines whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific effect mode. Further, based on the power-on, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time information counted by the time measuring means is initialized by the initializing means. As a result, if the power is turned on all at once in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied for a plurality of gaming machines in the amusement hall, the timing information counted by the timing means is initialized all at once by the initialization means. Since the timing is newly started at the same timing, the timing information measured by the timing means of each gaming machine can be adjusted. And since the judgment whether to switch to a specific production | generation aspect is judged based on timing information, if the timing information of each game machine corresponds, the malfunction to which the timing switched to a specific presentation aspect will shift | deviate. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in a plurality of gaming machines, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by shifting the timing of switching to a specific effect mode from each other.

  In the gaming machine C1, initialization avoiding means for avoiding initialization by the initialization means of timing information measured by the timing means when it is determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition is not satisfied A gaming machine C2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is not established, the initialization avoidance means avoids initialization of the time information counted by the time measuring means. As a result, a plurality of gaming machines in the game hall are turned on all at once in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the timing information counted by the timing means of each gaming machine is matched, Even if the machine is turned off, initialization of the timing information by the initialization avoiding means can be avoided if the power is turned on again when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing information measured by the timing means from deviating from the timing information measured by the timing means of other gaming machines that have not been switched off. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable by shifting the timing of switching to a specific performance mode based on the game.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the time measuring means includes time measuring means for measuring time and elapsed time measuring means for measuring elapsed time, and the initialization means determines the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means. A gaming machine C3 that is to be initialized.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since power-on while grasping the current time.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the state in which the effect is determined in the specific effect mode, the effect switching determination unit switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode. Whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determination unit When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notifying unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the switched effect mode. The game machine C4 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, there is an effect that the novelty can be felt every time the production mode is switched, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the display control means is in a state where an effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification unit, or the specific effect. A gaming machine C5, comprising: state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is only necessary to specify the presentation mode based on the information stored in the information storage unit, so that the display control unit does not need to acquire the timing information measured by the timing unit and determine the current presentation mode, and the display control. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C5, the game machine C5 includes a control unit that controls a game, and the display control unit includes a display specifying unit that specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control unit from a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means provided for each of the plurality of display types, storing prescription information that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type for each screen; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the definition information corresponding to the display type specified by the specification information storage means, and the selection means stores the specification information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine C6, which is selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the display control means does not determine every image information necessary for drawing an image for each screen when performing the presentation, but the display control means stores the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the video without any frame failure can be reliably displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic D group> (The initial value of the counting means is determined based on the period during which the power is cut off)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and timing means capable of timing even when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted In the machine, counting means for updating the count value every predetermined period based on power-on, and whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode based on the count value of the count means Effect switching determination means capable of determining whether, the acquisition means capable of acquiring the time information measured by the time measurement means, the time information storage means capable of storing the time information acquired by the acquisition means, and the time information Time storage information storage control means that can be controlled to acquire and store time information from the time measurement means by the acquisition means when the power interruption state occurs in the storage means, and power-on Based on the condition determination means capable of determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timekeeping information storage control means A game comprising: initial value determination means for determining an initial value of the counting means based on the timing information stored in the timing information storage means and the timing information newly acquired by the acquisition means Machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the count value is updated by the counting means every predetermined period based on power-on, and the effect mode displayed by the display control unit is changed to the specific effect mode based on the count value of the count means. Whether or not to switch is determined by the effect switching determination means. Then, the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is obtained by the obtaining means, and the timekeeping information obtained by the obtaining means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means. Further, the time information storage control means controls the time information storage means to acquire and store the time information from the time measurement means by the acquisition means when the power interruption occurs. Here, based on the power-on, it is determined by the condition determining means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time information storage is performed. The initial value determining means determines the initial value of the counting means in accordance with the timing information stored in the timing information storage means by the control means and the timing information newly acquired by the acquisition means. As a result, if a plurality of gaming machines in the game hall are turned on all at once without satisfying a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is in a power interruption state, the timing information Since it is possible to specify the period in which the power was interrupted from the time information stored in the storage means and the time information newly acquired by the acquiring means, the counting means is based on the period in which the power was interrupted. The initial value can be determined by the initial value determining means. Therefore, by determining a value corresponding to the count value updated by the counting means of the other gaming machine during the power interruption state as an initial value, it is possible to suppress a problem that the timing for switching to a specific effect mode is shifted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the gaming machine D1, the count information based on the count value of the count means can be stored, the count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power interruption state, and when the power interruption state occurs, Count information storage control means for storing count information based on the count value of the count means in the count information storage means, and the initial value determination means is configured such that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. If it is determined, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means, the time information stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means, and the acquisition means The game is characterized in that the initial value of the counting means is determined based on the newly acquired timing information. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the count information based on the count value of the count means is stored by the count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power interruption state. When the power interruption state occurs, the count information based on the count value of the count means is stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means. Here, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means and the time information storage control Based on the timing information stored in the timing information storage means by the means and the timing information newly acquired by the acquisition means, the initial value of the counting means is determined by the initial value determination means. Thus, since the initial value of the counting means can be determined in consideration of the count value of the counting means immediately before the interruption state, the count value before the interruption state and the period of the interruption state Therefore, the value corresponding to the count value of the counting means of the gaming machine that is not in the other power interruption state can be accurately determined as the initial value of the counting means by the initial value determining means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the timing of switching to a specific effect mode is shifted between a gaming machine that is in a disconnected state and a gaming machine that is not in a disconnected state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the gaming machine D2, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value, and the value is subtracted at each update, and the value is When the value is updated after reaching the specific minimum value, the value is updated to the specific maximum value, and the initial value determining means is configured to satisfy the predetermined condition by the condition determining means. If it is determined that there is no game machine D3, the specific maximum value is determined as the initial value of the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value. The value is subtracted by the counting means every time it is updated, and when the value is updated after the value reaches a specific minimum value, it is updated to a specific maximum value by the counting means. Here, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific maximum value is determined as the initial value of the counting means by the initial value determining means. As a result, the count value of the counting means is updated in a predetermined range from a specific maximum value to a specific minimum value at a predetermined cycle, and therefore becomes a specific minimum value after the count value reaches the specific maximum value. The time required until the time can be made constant. Therefore, when the power is turned on again in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initial value of the count value can be easily determined by the initial value determining means based on the period of the power interruption state. In addition, since the time required for the count value of the counting means to go around is constant, the time for switching to the specific effect mode can also be constant. Therefore, the player can easily guess the time zone in which the specific effect mode is set, so that the player can play the game aiming at the time of the specific effect mode, or the normal effect mode other than the specific effect mode. You can play games aiming at time. As described above, there is an effect that a player having various preferences can easily recognize the time zone in which the production mode matches the preference.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D3, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state where the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode. Whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determination unit When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notifying unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the switched effect mode. The game machine D4 is characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, there is an effect that the novelty can be felt every time the production mode is switched, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine D4, the display control means is in a state where an effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification unit, or the specific effect. A gaming machine D5, comprising: state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is only necessary to specify the presentation mode based on the information stored in the information storage unit, so that the display control unit does not need to acquire the timing information measured by the timing unit and determine the current presentation mode, and the display control. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D5, the game machine D5 includes a control unit that controls a game, and the display control unit includes a display specifying unit that specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control unit from a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means provided for each of the plurality of display types, storing prescription information that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type for each screen; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the definition information corresponding to the display type specified by the specification information storage means, and the selection means stores the specification information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine D6, which is selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the display control means does not determine every image information necessary for drawing an image for each screen when performing the presentation, but the display control means stores the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the video without any frame failure can be reliably displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic E group> (The time for switching to the specific effect is stored in the storage means)
In a gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying an effect mode and a display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, it is possible to measure the time even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Display by the display control means based on the time measuring means having a storage area capable of storing predetermined setting information, the time measuring information timed by the time measuring means, and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area Effect switching determining means for determining whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and condition determining means Based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined setting information and the timing information that the timing means counts whether or not the effect mode is switched to the specific effect mode. Game machine characterized by comprising a-on determining means for determining from E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined setting information is stored in the storage area of the timing means that can count even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, based on the timing information measured by the timing unit and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area, it is determined whether or not to switch the rendering mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific rendering mode. Determined by means. Further, based on power-on, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is determined to be established by the condition determining means, whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, predetermined setting information and time information measured by the time measuring means, Is determined by the input time determining means. As a result, even if one of the plurality of gaming machines is turned off, the timing means having the storage area operates even after the power supply is cut off. The setting information can be retained even after the power supply is cut off. Therefore, based on the predetermined setting information, it is determined by the effect switching determination means whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode. Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction of having shifted | deviated with respect to a game machine can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, the timing unit includes a specific mode notification unit for notifying the display control unit when the production switching determination unit determines that the production mode is switched to a specific production mode. Based on the notification by the notification means, the display control means switches the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the time measuring means determines that the effect mode is switched to the specific effect mode by the effect switching determining means, the specific mode notifying means notifies the display control means. Then, based on the notification by the specific mode notification unit, the display mode displayed on the display unit is switched to the specific display mode by the display control unit. Thus, the display control means only has to switch the effect mode to the specific effect mode based on the notification from the specific mode notification means, and therefore the time counting means counts time in order to determine whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode. There is no need to frequently acquire information and check the elapsed time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the effect switching determination unit is configured to display the effect mode displayed by the display control unit on the basis of the timing information measured by the timing unit and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area. It is determined whether or not to switch to a normal effect mode, and the time measuring unit notifies the display control unit when the effect switch determining unit determines to switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode. A game machine E3 characterized in that the display control means switches the effect mode displayed on the display means to the normal effect mode based on the notification by the normal mode notification means. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control unit to the normal effect mode based on the timing information measured by the time measuring unit and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area It is judged by. Then, when it is determined that the effect mode is switched to the normal effect mode by the effect switching determination unit, the time measuring unit is notified to the display control unit by the normal mode notifying unit. Here, based on the notification by the normal mode notification unit, the display mode displayed on the display unit is switched to the normal display mode by the display control unit. As a result, the display control means only has to switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode based on the notification from the normal mode notification means. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not to switch to the normal effect mode, There is no need to frequently acquire information and check the elapsed time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Notify at the set time of the player)
In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and timing means capable of timing even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, Whether a predetermined condition is established based on setting means that allows the player to set setting information, time information that is timed by the time measuring means, and setting information that is set in the setting means. A condition determining unit for determining, and a notification mode selecting unit for selecting a notification mode to be notified by the notification unit based on the setting information when the condition determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F1, the setting information is set by the setting means. Then, based on the time information measured by the time measuring means and the setting information set in the setting means, the condition determining means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition is established, the notification mode to be notified by the notification means based on the setting information is selected by the notification mode selection means. Thereby, the player who has set the setting information in the setting means can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the notification by the notification means, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied too much to concentrate on the game. Continuing the game without noticing can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the display control unit causes the display unit to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect mode selected by the notification mode selection unit is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit. As a result, when a predetermined condition is established, an effect mode based on the notification mode is displayed on the display means, which is a place where the player pays attention in the game, so that the player does not notice the notification. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress continuing the game. In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is provided with erasing means capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting information set by the setting unit is deleted by the deleting unit. As a result, when other players have set with the setting means, but quit the game before the predetermined condition based on the setting information is satisfied, the setting information can be deleted by the deleting means. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who plays the game with the gaming machine from being notified by the notification means when the predetermined condition based on the setting information set by the previous player is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothersome because the notification by the notification means interferes with the game.

  The gaming machines F1 to F3 include control means for performing control related to the game, and the display control means is provided for each of the plurality of notification modes, and is a drawing showing information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the notification mode Corresponding to the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit from among the plurality of the definition information stored in the regulation information storage unit, the regulation information storage unit that stores the regulation information that defines the information for each screen A gaming machine F4, characterized in that the display control means executes a notification mode based on the regulation information selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the display control means does not determine every image information necessary for drawing an image for each screen when performing the presentation, but the display control means stores the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the video without any frame failure can be reliably displayed on the display means.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
23 Operation input section (setting means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
262 Timing device (timer)
352a Timekeeping register (clocking means)
S4003 Condition discriminating means S4101 Part of notification mode selecting means

Claims (3)

Display means capable of displaying the effect mode;
Display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means;
In a gaming machine comprising timing means capable of timing even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off,
A setting means by which the player can set the setting information;
Condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the time information measured by the time measuring means and the setting information set in the setting means;
And a notification mode selection unit for selecting a notification mode to be notified by the notification unit based on the setting information when the condition determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Gaming machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control unit causes the display unit to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an erasing unit capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting unit.

Images